大学英语新世纪视听说第二册听力原文及答案免费
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳语创编
新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box? Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too. The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this clubwrite, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together. Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers. OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles;7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod;8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king asa gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people! What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such asweightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.欧阳语创编A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳语创编A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classic OL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4.a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳数创编
新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home! Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of mygrandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful booksto hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6.titles; 7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products. Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits andvegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such asweightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale. I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool. Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in。
新世纪大学英语视听说第二册听力原文
新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的listening 原文Unit One, Book 2Listening 2 Just a few old keepsakesBoy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this boxGrandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: KeepsakesG: Young man, you know what a keepsake is!B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s thisG: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. Y ou can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big bookG: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 3 My first trip aloneAt the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 4Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to holdspecial memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps.1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, an d Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 5Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “best dressed” (astudent with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Unit 2, Book 2Listening 21Man: Where are you running to, PaulaWoman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This i s my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okayW: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your motherM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you goingW: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theaterM: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure What street is this M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map I want to check.Listening 3 How are you doingPaula: So, Jane, what are you doing these daysJane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers How are they doingJ: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you How are you doing these daysP: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety. J: Community safetyP: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire, AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community. Listening 4 Travel Asia: Know before you go!Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. D on’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your lef t hand.And don’t point at peop le with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Listening 5World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy, or that the person thinks something is funny. But it can also mean that the person is embarrassed. Unit 3,Listening 1 The Slow Food movementToday our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the world. Its members don’t like f ast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products. Listening 3 Who eats whatAdam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I lov e the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Listening 4Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chili peppers.1. Chili peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chili peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chili peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chili peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chili comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it makes your mouth feel “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chili peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chilis do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chilis can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chili peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chili pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chili peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chili pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chili sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica. Listening 5 The healthiest people in the worldIn many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has10 centenarians per 100, 1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercises. They also enjoy massage.Unit 4Listening 2 What’s your personal style1.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your nameGio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you fromG: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes fromG: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your styleG: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are youE: I’m Elena.I: And where are you fromE: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal styleE: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. …in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your nameV: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of styleV: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Listening 3 What should I do1A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I doB: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wearB: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I doB: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday. A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time. B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Listening 4A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your adviceB1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you thinkExpert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywh ere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I justwant to be comfortable! What’s your adviceExpert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Listening 5 TrendspottingToday I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal, and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me. Do you know the rock group called “Gifted” They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. I guess they are trying to choose one. This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like” “Why do you like them” “Wouldyou buy a CD with this cover”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!Unit 5, Book 2Listening 2 Strange lightsMike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature s. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a l ocal man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 . He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmm, … that’s strange story. What happened nextA: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seemlike those lights really exist. What do you think, AlexaA: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Listening 3 A strange storyIt w as raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in.I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said c almly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Listening 4A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were knocked down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes aroundin space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100, 00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice, and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in 1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t w ork correctly.Listening 5 The Marfa mystery lightsQ. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous forA. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactlyA. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that. Q. Can you describe themA. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think soA. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lightsA. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lightsA. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts sayA. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scaredA. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.Unit 6Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird d ream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep. Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. Ithad a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electricity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night.How much sleep do you need The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hours of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sleep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early. Listening 4The meaning of dreamsFor centuries, people have asked: why do we dream What do our dreams mean Today, science d oesn’t have definite answers to thesequestions, but we do know some things about dreams. First, we all dream, often 4 to 5 times a night. Second, we don’t usually remember most of our dreams. And finally, when we dream, our brains are very active.Thousands of years ago, people began to study dreams. In many cultures, people believed dreams were messages from spirits or gods. Later, the ancient Greeks and Romans had a new idea: Dreams come from a person’s mind. Doctors studied dreams to help sick or worrie d people.I n the past, some cultures used dreams to predict the future. They thought dreams could help a person choose a husband or wife, guess a baby’s birthday, or starts a business. IN some places, this practice is still common.Today, scientists think dreams are about our thoughts and feelings. Our minds send us messages about our lives. Unfortunately, many messages are often strange or confusing. People wake up and think: What did that dream meanSo, how can you understand the messages in your dreams Think about the events in the dream. What do they say about your life For example, one common dream is about flying. Sometimes this dream means you feel free or want freedom. Other times it means you feel afraid. What do your dreams tell you about your life。
大学英语新世纪视听说第二册听力原文及答案
新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的optional listening 原文及答案免费下载Unit One, Book 22-1-3------- 2-1-4 ------ Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My ye arbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home.I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I did n’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. Thiswill make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents andhe saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon.3.Yes;4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign;8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your motherM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study. M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a p roject about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch e ach other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maoriare the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers;4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great;4. project;5. AIDS;6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous;6. business card;7. jump and nod;8. for luck;9. start laughing;10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrateand support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal.I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they e at a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B.1. fast;2.life;3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off;6. gets covered with;7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes;9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable no w.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always w ear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear l ong skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer.A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about bec oming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have car ds. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashioned Vicki: mother, classicOL2:A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance. OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do. 2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”. 4. Theyjust talked about the covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month 3. six CD covers, not one CD cover 4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase;5. gets tired;6.stop to rest;7. had better;8. get some ice cream;9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story ju st in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax! Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?”I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. Shedied five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern.Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible thata part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so? A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs.I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded 4. used electricity 5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment;5. showing;6. has an alibi;7. it isn’t true;8. walks in;9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare. Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳与创编
新世纪大学英语 2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes. B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt verynervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make yourscrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and growsin the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People havehealthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans,may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birthrecords from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. Theywere very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. TheUnited States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many freshfruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea.But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxingactivities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also havea good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathingexercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3.farmers; 4. Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat andmakes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chilepepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳与创编 2021.03.08 Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think? Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you lik e?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone. M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly. Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883. Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi;7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move. Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep. Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electr icity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Optional Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night.How much sleep do you need? The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hpurs of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sle ep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early. Optional Listening 4。
新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文unit3
新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文unit3----95f780ae-715f-11ec-97df-7cb59b590d7d14视听说听力原文unit3a:让我们换个新的。
b:butihavebroughtmylunch.1.早上好。
atnoon.下午。
intheevening.b:我很乐意。
但是我很高兴。
2.shedoesn'tlikesaladingeneral.她不喜欢男人的孩子。
shewon'thavethesalad.她会带一些沙拉回家。
>b:sure...andwhatareyougoingtoprint?a:意大利餐厅的团队。
你会得到40%b:oh,thatsoundsterrific.soareyougoingtothatrestaurantfordinner,tony?现在是周末。
b:uh...iamnotsure.whatdotheyserve?披萨,意大利面,牛排,羊肉,鸡肉,沙拉。
b.allright,tony.i'llnotgo.theonlythingthaticaneatisvegetablesalad.a:为什么?嘿,我不知道你是素食主义者。
b:no,i'mnot.buti'mondieteverysaturday.thatmeansnomeatoroilyfoods.a:那是。
奇怪的你没有超重,也没有否决权。
你真是太棒了。
越是,越是。
他们说这里的火柴非常危险。
b:嗯。
我我不知道,但是。
a:don'thesitateanymore.thecouponexpiresnextweekend.b:allright.okay,youwin.问题3至5基于您刚刚听到的对话。
becausehewantstoprintouthishomework.因为我们停止打印这本书。
(灵石共享集团发布391337364)becausehewantstoprintouthispicture.因为我们停止打印优惠券。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳物创编
新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s person al! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my hig h school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’snot hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ bestdressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). Th ere are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s firstyear”. 5. Use imagina tion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mo therM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to stud y.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t po int at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Th at means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpr ised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.欧阳物创编 2021.02.07 B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳物创编 2021.02.07Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye m y hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be c omfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my ha ir red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Ex pert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. Th e “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said,“No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popu lar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good w eekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s startin g to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and wal ked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sm all town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. D ifferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came fro m Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t tru e;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It r an toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。
大学英语新世纪视听说第二册听力原文及答案免费
2的optional listening 原文及答案免 费下载Unit On e, Book 22-1-3 ---- 2-1-4 __Liste ning 1Gran dma: Oh, no thi ng really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Oh, ok ….Well then, what 's that? It has your picture in it.Boy: Hey, Gran dma, what's in this box?B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is ! B: No, I don ' t. I really don't.'s something you keep. It alot of memories. G: Well, it ' s something that gives youB: Oh. What's this?G: Now donsee ….that 't go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let ' s my first diary.B: Can IG: No, you canboyfrie nd in there. He became your gran dfather!'t read it! It' s pers on al! I wrote about myfirst新世纪大学英语视听说教程G: That ' s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe byship.B: What ' s that big book?G: My year book. It ' s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that ' s old!G: That ' s about eno ugh out of you, young man. I think ittime we put this box away and …Liste ning 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visitmy gran dpare nts in Los An geles. I felt very n ervous abouttraveling so far, but my mother said, “ Don ' t worry. You fine. ” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in LosAngeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, Ididn ' t want to go home!Liste ning 3Maki ng memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautifulbooks to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can in cludephotos, draw in gs, jour nal en tries. It scrapbook that yous not hard to make awill enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples:“ School days, ”“ Family travel, ”“ Memories of my grandparents, ” “ Baby ' s first year. ”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better tha n ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old n ewspaper clipp in gs, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Desig n the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use yourimagi nati on!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step!Remember to write down the “ 5 Ws ” of your photos: Who,What, Where, Whe n, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Liste ning 4Yearbooks in the Un ited StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year—— a “ book of memories ” for thestude nts.In side a yearbook is each stude nt ' s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or sec on d-year stude nts. The last photos are the first-year stude nts, the freshme n. The yearbook is not on ly about stude nts. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptio ns of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is eve n a yearbook club. Stude nts in this club write, desig n, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is pr in ted.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniorsvote and choose the “ class clown ”( a funny student), the“ most likely to succeed ”( a stude nt every one thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed ” (a student with a goodfashi on sen se). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other ' s yearbooks. This isespecially importa nt for the seniors, because they are graduati ng.Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot offun, ” o“ I ' II never forget you. ” They also write about all thefun and funny experie nces they shared in school together.Keys:0L1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfrie nd 2.Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for along time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with hisgrandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn ' t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbook ing is maki ng beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be in cluded in scrapbooks. 2.Old n ewspaper clipp in gs, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “ 5 Ws ” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “ School days ” , “ Family travel ” , “ Memories of my grandparents ”,“ Baby ' s first year5. Usd'imagination todesig n the pages, and the n decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they aregraduati ng soon. 3.Y es; 4. At the end of the year. 5」t mea ns astude nt with a good fashi on sen se.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sig n; 8. memories0L51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6.pendant; 7. she was in college; 8. had no frien ds; 9. rem ind her tobe stron g; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Opti onal Liste ning 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie ' s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I ' ll help you.W: I don ' t see Connie any where.M: Look! She ' s over there. Standig at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn ' t see us.W: You ' re right, It ' s too no isy, and she ' s talk ing to some one. 2M: Well, here we are. This is my momW: It ' s beautiful.M: Hey, Je n. Are you okay?W: I ' m just a little n ervous. ItmotherM: Come on. Don ' t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I ' d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It ' s very nice to meet you. W: It ' s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I ' m going to the library to study.M: For what? It ' s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They ' re n ext week. M: Wow, well, good luck!s house.s my first time meeting yourW: Tha nks!4.W: Bill, it ' s late. Where ' s the theater? M: Hmmm … I think it ' s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm …I don ' t know.W: Where ' s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I ' m worki ng in an ofice. And I ' m study ing computerscie nee in the eve ning.P: You ' re rely busy!J: That ' s for sure! And in my free time, I ' m learning Spanish f my vacatio n. I ' m pla nning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They ' re doing great! Alex is help ing our father in his bus in ess,and Adam is going to Pacific Un iversity.P: How n ice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I ' m doing great, too. I ' m worki ng on a project aboutcom mun ity safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We ' re pla nning a campaig n aga inst theft, fire ,AIDSand drugs in our com muni ty.J: Oh, that sounds in teresti ng!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the com muni ty.Opti onal Liste ning 3Know before you go!In Ban gladesh people greet their friends by shaki ng hands softlyand the n putt ing their hands over their heart. People inBangladesh don ' t use many gestures. Waving at people andwinking are very rude. Don ' t touch people on the head. Donpoint with your foot---Ban gladeshi people thi nk feet are very dirty.Indon esia ns greet people with a long han dshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeti ng, give every pers on your bus in ess card, but use your right hand——using your left hand is very rude in Indon esia.In Thaila nd, the traditi onal greet ing is called wai----people puttheir hand s together and bow. Men and women don ' t oftentouch each other in public. Thai people don ' t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laughwhe n they feel n ervous or embarrassed.People in the Un ited Arab Emirates have some special gestures.Whe n two men meet, they shake han ds. Sometimes old men touch no ses together. Wome n kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn ' t shake hands with her. He justsmiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don ' tt point a use your left hand. And donpeopole with your fin ger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Opti onal Liste ning4World greeti ngsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. Whe n wome n meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Wome n also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake han ds, look at the pers on in the eyes. This shows in terest and frie ndli ness.In New Zeala nd, usually, both men and wome n shake hands whe n they meet some one for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people press ing their no ses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditi onal greet ing.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In bus in ess, people also shake han ds. In formal situati ons, people ofte n excha nge bus in ess cards. When you give a bus in ess card, give it with both han ds. This is polite. Special no te: In Japa n, a smile can have differe nt meanin gs. It usually means that the pers on is happy. or that the pers on thinks someth ing is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed. Keys:0L1: A. 1. wav ing to; 2. shak ing han ds; 3. cross ing his fin gers; 4.shrugg ingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That ' s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They ' re doing cproject; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake han ds; 2. Japa n, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(eachother on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japa n, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditi on al; 2.greet in gs; 3.1 ear ning; 4.trip; 5. n ervous; 6.bus in ess card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughi ng; 10.relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Opti on al liste ning 1Today our lives are busier tha n they were 10 or 20 years ago. Forsome people, this is a problem. They thi nk we should slow dow nand enjoy life. The Slow Food moveme nt was started to celebrateand support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its membersdon ' t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are un healthy.The Slow Food moveme nt started in Europe, but now it is anintern ati onal moveme nt. There are more tha n 65,000 membersin 45 countries. The Slow Food movement ' s members think we n eed to slow dow n and appreciate delicious traditi onal foods.They also believe in protect ing the en vir onmen t. In additi on, theybelieve in support ing local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I ' m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet.There ' s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Every one says that I sho uld eat less butter. It ' s hard.Jan et: I lived in Thaila nd for six mon ths. It was really fun. I reallylike Thai food! It ' s too spicy for some people, but not for me. Ilove the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food heretastes so bland--- I don ' t lik it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “ sweet tooth. ” That meanI like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. Ilike anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I ' m training for a swimming competition. I have to eathealthy foods all the time. At first I didn ' t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Opti onal Liste ning 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world.Farmers grew the first chile peppers more tha n 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the pla nt spread through South America and the Caribbea n. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaic in. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee“ hot. ”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and In dia n scie ntists discovered that eat ing chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec In dia ns of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the haba nero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every con ti nent except An tarctica.Optional Listening 4In many coun tries of the world, people are liv ing Ion ger tha n before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okin awa is an isla nd off the coast of Japa n. The people on Okin awa, the Okin awa ns, may have the Ion gest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by look ing at city and tow n birtht exp records from 1879. They did n ect tofind many centen aria ns in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The Un ited States, for example, has 10 centen aria ns per 100,1000 people. In Okin awa there are 34 centen aria ns per 100,100 people!What is the Okin awa ns ' secret? First, they eat a healthy diet.They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okin awa ns have other healthy habits as well. They don ' t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging --in stead, they prefer relax ing activities like garde ning and walk ing. Researchers say that older Okin awa ns also have a good attitude about agi ng. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathi ng exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:0L1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B.1. fast; 2」ife; 3. farmers; 4. Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breath ing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. con test; 2. tomatoes; 3. add ing; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with;7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Opti onal Liste ning 11.In terviewer (In t): Hi, what ' s your n ame?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Mila n, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I ' m always borrow ing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I ' m not very inno vative. I just wear the samething all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Ele na: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I ' m Ele na.I: And where are you from?E: I ' m from right here in New Y ork.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from …?E: A store in my n eighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It s fashi on able now.I: It looks old-fash ion able now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good eve ning. What is your n ame?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Won derful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I ' mcfm Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your pers onal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Opti onal Liste ning 21A: I ' m new in town and I ' d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don ' t like sports.B: You could look for frie nds on the In ternet.2A: I don ' t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear? B: You could wear your new jea ns or your black pan ts.A: It ' s a formal dress party.to wear a dress.t un dersta nd this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. ItThursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give meextra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. ThereA: I still don s not much time!Opti onal Liste ning 3A--A sense of style1.1 ' m a salesclerk in a woman ' s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wearlong skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on .It ' s really bori ng, so I ' m pla nning to dye my hair red. What do youthi nk?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about myclothes. She does n ' t want to go any where with me because Ialways wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don ' t care aboutlooki ng like a fashi on magaz in e. I just want to be comfortable!What ' s your advice?B1. I ' m a salesclerk in a woman ' s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wearlong skirts, black shoes, no j ewelry, and on and on .It ' s really bori ng, so I ' m pla nning to dye my hair red. What do youthi nk?Expert s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer.A bus in ess wants to have a particular look, so they tell youwhat to wear. If you want to show off your in dividual style, youhad better do it in your free time.2.1 love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about myclothes. She does n ' t want to go any where with me because Ialways wear old jeans and a T- shirt. I don ' t care aboutlooki ng like a fashi on magaz in e. I just want to be comfortable!What ' s your advice?Expert ' s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk withyour girlfrie nd and expla in how you feel. We all have our ownstyle and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much aboutappeara nces.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a tren dspotter. I wasnervous and didn ' t know what to expect. Well, guess what? Itwas a lot of fun! I ' m telling all my friends, “ You shouldabout beco ming a tren dspotter, too ”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studioby 10 am The “ Trends Coordinator, ” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave eachperson three cards. One ca rd said “ Yes —All the way! ”Ano ther said, “It ' s OK. ” The third one said, “ No way! liste ned to about 10 differe nt son gs. After each song we hadto hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavymetal; and dance music. The heavy metal was for No way ”me.Do you know the rock group called “ Gifted ” ? They ' re reall popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six differe nt CD covers. (I guess they are trying to chooseon e.) This time, we did n ' t have cards. In stead, we just talkedabo ut the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions,“ Wones do you like? ”“ Why do you like them? ”“ Would you buy a CD with this cover? ”We fini shed at 12:30. We will meet aga in n ext week at aboutique dow ntow n. We will look at some new fashi ons. Eachweek we go to a differe nt locati on. Oh yes, we also received ab B. 1. You could look for friends on the in ternet.'t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taki ng the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appeara nee. free CD for our tour. Thisjob doesn ' t pay, but we get a free stuff!That ' s all for now!KeysOL1: A Ele na: New Y orkVicki: Ho ng Kong B. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in n eighborhood /retro, old-fashi onedVicki: mother, classic OL2 : A. f c 2. You should n0L4 B. 1. She was n ervous and did n had to report tot what t(2.dShea record ing studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had todec ide which song was “ OK” , and which one was “ Noway ”. 4. They just talked about the covers they liked. 5.They are going to look at some new fashi ons.C. 1. doesn ' t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way ” card, Notan “It ' s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogg ing; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. in crease; 5.gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9.of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Opti onal Liste ning 1Mike: …Soe can look forward to warmer temperature. It ' ll be a good weeke nd for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And fin ally,this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, NickBrow n, saw some stra nge lights. He was dri ving home at about10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved acrossthe sky. He stopped at a gas stati on and talked to a policeofficer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that ' s strange storyVhat happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no filmin his camera. Fin ally, he called his wife on his cell pho ne. Butby that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a lege nd around here aboutmysterious ligh ts … a lot of local people have seen the lights.It ' s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What doyou think, Alexa?A: I don ' t believe it. I think it ' s some kind of hoax! Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn ' t dev^lelowlylSudde nly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed n eatly andsta nding in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow,I stopped the car quickly. “ What are you doing? ” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn ' t answer. “ Are you OK?” I asked. “I ' m fine, ” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to myhotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl.you know her? ” I asked. “ Oh yes, ” he said calmly.“ ThMary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a caraccide nt duri ng a rain storm. ”Opti onal Liste ning 3A. The Tun guska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in easter n Russia.Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska.People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were dow n. People heard the explosi on 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosi on? A cen tury later,scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible expla nati ons.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock thatgoes around in space and sometimes hit the pla net. They cancause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosi on.2. A comet: Comets are gia nt balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern.Encke ' s Comet was near Earth in 1908, and ita part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceshipcrashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wan ted to destroy the earth,so they aimed their weap ons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists madea mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man namedNikola Tesla tried to build a “ supergunMaybe it was a test of his gun and it didnOptional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States.It ' s famous for the “ Marfa mystery lightsQ. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many differe nt ideas about that. s possible thatthat used electricity. 't work correctly.Q. Can you describe them?A. That ' s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sun set in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vani sh. Then they sudde nly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don ' t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellis on and the year was 1883. Of course we didn ' t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native America ns thought the lights were stars falli ng to Earth. Some people th ink ura nium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball light ning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rain storm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ ghost lights ” . They think ghosts do it. That ' s the strangest idea. Some say they areUFOs. I don ' t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can ' t figure it out. Some engineers even came fromJapan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn ' t solv the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren ' t. They like the lights. And everyyear in early September there is a big tow n festival to celebrate the mystery lights. KeysOL1: A.从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brow n, police officer,local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2.Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said walked away quietly.I ' m fine.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accide nt five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; n eatly; quickly; stra ngely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosi on; 2. In easter n Russia n; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1,3 (sec ond row) 5, 2。
(完整版)新世纪大学英语视听说2(第三版)听力部分答案(全)
Nora Nelson: She lives in 2AWes and Lydia: They live in 3BTwo boys: They’re classmatesMrs. Hanson: She’s related to Nora. She lives in 3C’s affairsA nosy person might be too interested in things that do not concern them, especially other peopleActivity 22-- passport 1-- diary 3---yearbook2. boyfriend3. it’s personal4. Europe, ship5. sixtiesActivity 31. 132. To visit his grandparents.3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman.4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he didn’t even want to go home.very nervous about traveling so far His grandparents their home twoActivity 4theme other paper keepsakes your photos and keepsakes1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories.2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.parents”, “and “Baby’s first year.”3. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grand4. You can use felt pens, paints, and stickers.5. The “5Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when, and why.Activity 51. Most high schools in the U.S.2. Because they are graduating soon.3. Yes.4. At the end of the year.5. It means a student with a good fashion sense.Once a year spring chess most likely to succeed categories notes I’ll never forget yourecord photo seniors sports yearbook titles sign memoriesFrom left to right: 1 3 2Bored sad happyActivity 21. waving to2. shaking hands3. crossing his fingers4. shrugging1.wallet2. nervous3. studying for a test4. the theaterActivity 3They are both doing great.1. That’s for sure2. planning a trip to3. What about your brothers4. They’re doing great5. working ona project 6. planning a campaign againstActivity 41. People shake hands.: Bangladesh Indonesia The United Arab Emirates2. People bow. : Indonesia, Thailand3. People give business cards. : Indonesia4. There are rules about touching. : Bangladesh, Thailand5. Don’t wave at people here. : Bangladesh6. There aren’t many hand gestures.: Bangladesh Thailand7. People don’t wink.: Bangladesh,8. Don’t use your left hand here. : Indonesia The United Arab Emirates9. Don’t point at people with your finger. : The United Arab EmiratesActivity 51. shake hands2. Japan, bow3. Maori4. Brazil, kiss ( each other on the cheek)5. in the eyes6. Japan, embarrassedIn Japan, when meeting for the first time in formal situations, people often exchange business cards. The polite way to give or receive a business card is to hold it with two hands.Mississippi mud pie1. Delicious, crispy2. bland3. oily, good4. tasty, too sweetActivity 2We should support and celebrate local food traditions.1.fast2. life3. farmers4. Europe5. membersActivity 3Adam: buttery Janet: spicy Abby: sweet Minh: healthy1.He wanted to lose weight because he was 20 pounds overweight.2.Because she has spent six months in Thailand and comes to like spicy Thai food.3.It means that Abby likes to eat sweet foods.4.Because Minh is training for a swimming competition and he has to eat healthy foods. And now he prefershealthy foods to sweet or buttery foods.Activity 41. T2.F3.T4.F5.F6.T7.T8. FCapsaicin: a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero: the hottest chile pepper in the world. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.Activity 5What they eat: fresh fruits, vegetables, fish;What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking;How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage1. 34 centenarians per 100,000 Okinawans.2. The Okinawans’secret: first, they eat a healthy diet. Second, they don’t do hard exercise. Third, the older Okinawans have a good attitude about aging.Dan: takes care of the baby Courtney: goes to work every dayJamal and Tia: both take care of the girls and work at home1. True2. True3. True4. FalseActivity 2Hometown: Milan New York Hong KongClothes from: brother a store in the neighborhood motherPersonal style: casual retro, old fashioned classicActivity 31----f 2----c 3----b1.You could look for friends on the Internet.2.You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3.You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. Activity 41. b2. a1.Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time2.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearances.Activity 5A trendspotter finds things that are new and popular. Companies might hire trendspottersto help them make new products.1.She was nervous and didn’t know what to do.2.She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m.3.They had to decide which song were “Yes---All the way!”, “It’s Ok”, or “No way!”.4.They just talked about the covers they liked.5.They are going to look at some new fashions.1.doesn’t pay, NOT has a good salary2.week, NOT month3.six CD covers, NOT only one CD cover4. a “No way” card, NOT an “It’s OK” cardThe most famous detectives ever known imaginary detective sixty Scottish author moneyDoctor 1887 intelligent Dr. Waston EnglandActivity 24 1 35 2Nick Brown,police officer, local peopleMike thinks the lights could be the same as those in a local legend.Alexa thinks the lights are a hoax.Activity 31. A young girl standing in the middle of the road.2. Because it was raining heavily.3. He stopped the car quickly.4. She said ”I `m fine.”and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.1. heavily2. clearly3. slowly4. neatly5. quickly6. strangely7. happily8. quietly9. Nervously 10. calmlyActivity 41. A terrible explosion2. In eastern Russia.3. June 30, 1908.(first row) 4, 1, 3; (second row) 5, 21. lots of damage huge explosion2. near Earth a part of it broke off3. crashed into the ground its engine exploded4. destroy the earth set fire to the forest5. used electricity a test of his gunActivity 52. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. c1.Different people see different lights.2.Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3.The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to earth.4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.1.Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of a circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.2.some people call the lights “ghost lights”.3.No, they aren’t. actually, they hold a town festival every September to celebrate the mystery lights.Rememberthe last picture1.Two tips. One is to label things in English. The other is to make a note of related words.2.You can rent a film and see it at home.Activity 2(from left to right)2, 3, 11.no one2. couldn’t run3. can’t swimActivity 31. pink2. pillars3. living room, kitchen4. large5. stereo system6. wasn’t1. True2. False; didn’t speak or smile3. False; all4. False; sitting5. True1. The storyteller heard a voice saying, “welcome home.” And he realized the dream house was his.2. He thought his dream was turning into a nightmare because his friends suddenly disappeared and it was scary.3. He liked the food processor most because it makes life much easier.4. He saw the stove was broken and that there was no electricity. He also saw the children were crying because they were hungry. He felt bad and wanted to help prepare a meal but began to despair when he found the refrigerator was empty.Activity 41. Stage 22. Stage 53. Stage 14. Stage 3 and 41.Four or five times.2. In stages 3 and 4.3. Fifteen to sixteen hours a day.4. Sleep is very important for learning.Activity 51. many times2. don’t remember3. very active4. gods5. Greeks and Romans1. True2. False3. False1. definite answers2. Why do we dream3. a person’s mind4. husband or wife5. start a business6. thoughts and feelings7. strange or confusing8. think about the events in the dream 9. feel free or want freedom 10. feel afraidbb a c1. another company2. a bachelor party and a big family reunion3. He’s excited about it and he likes the job.Activity 22, 4, 1, 3It was a lot of fun to rent loud and beautiful The only bad part for himfrom too much dancing some beautiful floats go down the river2,4,3,1traveling through India best memories water pistol shot/sprayed everyonea mess come out ofActivity 31.c2.a1. M2. D3. M4. M5. D1. gets very crowded2. after you arrive3. The most important event4. be sure to fins a good place to sit5. just relax and have fun6. before7. after the parade finishesActivity 41. F Before Mardi Gras even begins, there are over 70 parades of dazzling floats.2. F Start making reservations in August. Don’t wait until January.3. T Many streets are closed to cars, and bus and streetcar schedules often changed.4. T Get there early, about 4 hours ahead of big parades. F or the Sunday night parade, find a space in the morning.5. F You might need a jacket, sunglasses, an umbrella, or all three.6. T People ride on floats in the parades and give “throws” to the crowd.Activity 5b. People use a groundhog to predict the weather.1. T2. F; Not 1995, but 19933. T4. F; Not doesn’t usually see, but usually sees1. A groundhog is a small animal covered with brown fur. It lives in a hole in the ground and stays undergroundduring the winter.2.Every February 2, local people and sightseers in the town of Punxsutawney watch for Pete, a groundhog, tocome out of its hole. If it comes out, Groundhog Day is celebrated with a barbecue, a colorful festival in the park, a souvenir show and sale and even a storytelling festival.3.People think it means the weather will continue to be cold for at least six weeks.4.The weather in February in Punxsutawney is generally cold and will continue to be cold for another six to eightweeks.5.People would be disappointed if Pete didn’t appear.UNIT 8Activity 1F T FCaller: 1,2,3,5 service: 3,4,5Activity 21, 2, 5, 7, 82, 3She wanted to be sure it is safe for her and her young child to cross the road.She also wanted to know if there were any parks she could take her son to.Activity 31. Immediate Release2. picking up dry cleaning3. taking your children to practice4. done for you1.all2.all EXCEPT library books3.all EXCEPT clean and brush your pet1.The services are affordable and convenient.2.They can call (010)55556666.Activity 41. Neither2.Both3.Bogota’4.Both5.Both6.Curitiba7.Neither8.Bogota’1.Because Curitiba was one of Brazil’s fastest growing cities and there were serious pollution problems.2.This plan has been very successful. Curitiba’s population has grown by more than one hundred percent since1974, but traffic has decreased b y thirty percent. Curitiba has reduced air pollution and provided cleaner neighborhood for its citizens.bicycling and walking only Car Free Day without a car 125 closed to carsup to two million enjoy the clean air and quietActivity 5Inwood: eagles, an old forest, an old farmhouseFes-al-Bali: narrow streets, mosques, donkeys1. Inwood2.Fes-al-Bali3.Inwood4. Fes-al-Bal5.Inwood1.Inwood is a different in that it has lots of greenery. It has an old-growth forest, a farmhouse and you can gohiking.2.It’s more than 200 years old and it is no longer a farmhouse. It is now a museum.get lost a wall with gates drive across too narrow for cars walk pedestrians an donkeysReview: Units 1-4CDCCB BADABBAC ABA BDCDBCA ABD CDADtake care of sick telephone office effort spend someone elsehad gone out of town on some sudden unexpected businessI had missed seeing himEnjoyed my sightseeingReview: Units 5-8DDADA BCCBCBA BACBD CADBDC DACB DACcolor fashionable university worn to care for comfortable convenient Although T-shirts are now available in a wide varietymay bear a single wordnew designs are coming up all the time。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳体创编
新世纪大学英语2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too. The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). The re are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college; 8. had no friends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances. Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walk ed away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳理创编
新世纪大学英语 2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes. B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervousabout traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who,What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community. J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them. Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenariansper 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruitsand vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. Butresearchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities likegardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitudeabout aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. Theyalso enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in theworld. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳阳理创编 2021.03.04Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice? Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff! That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “Noway”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest;7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electricity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Optional Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night. How much sleep do you need? The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hpurs of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sle ep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early.Optional Listening 4The meaning of dreamsFor centuries, people have asked: why do we dream? What do our dreams mean? Today, science doesn’t have definite answers to t hese questions, but we do know some things about dreams. First, we all dream, often 4 to 5 times a night. Second, we don’t usually remember most of our dreams. And finally, when we dream, our brains are very active.Thousands of years ago, people began to study dreams. In many cultures, people believed dreams were messages from spirits or gods. Later, the ancient Greeks and。
新世纪大学英语视听说2(第三版)听力部分答案(全)
Unit 1Activity 1Nora Nelson: She lives in 2AWes and Lydia: They live in 3BTwo boys: They’re classmatesMrs. Hanson: She’s related to Nora. She lives in 3CA nosy person might be too interested in things that do not concern them, especially other people’s affairs Activity 22-- passport 1-- diary 3---yearbook2. boyfriend3. it’s personal4. Europe, ship5. sixtiesActivity 31. 132. To visit his grandparents.3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman.4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he didn’t even want to go home.very nervous a bout traveling so far His grandparents their home twoActivity 4theme other paper keepsakes your photos and keepsakes1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories.2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. “S chool days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grand parent s”, “and “Baby’s first year.”4. You can use felt pens, paints, and stickers.5. The “5Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when, and why.Activity 51. Most high schools in the U.S.2. Because they are graduating soon.3. Yes.4. At the end of the year.5. It means a student with a good fashion sense.Once a year spring chess most likely to succeed categories notes I’ll never forget yourecord photo seniors sports yearbook titles sign memoriesFrom left to right: 1 3 2Bored sad happyActivity 21. waving to2. shaking hands3. crossing his fingers4. shrugging1.wallet2. nervous3. studying for a test4. the theaterActivity 3They are both doing great.1. That’s for sure2. planning a trip to3. What about your brothers4. They’re doing great5. working ona project 6. planning a campaign againstActivity 41. People shake hands.: Bangladesh Indonesia The United Arab Emirates2. People bow. : Indonesia, Thailand3. People give business cards. : Indonesia4. There are rules about touching. : Bangladesh, Thailand5. Don’t wave at people here. : Bangladesh6. There aren’t many hand gestures.: Bangladesh Thailand7. People don’t wink.: Bangladesh,8. Don’t use your left hand here. : Indonesia The United Arab Emirates9. Don’t point at people with your finger. : The United Arab EmiratesActivity 51. shake hands2. Japan, bow3. Maori4. Brazil, kiss ( each other on the cheek)5. in the eyes6. Japan, embarrassedIn Japan, when meeting for the first time in formal situations, people often exchange business cards. The polite way to give or receive a business card is to hold it with two hands.Mississippi mud pie1. Delicious, crispy2. bland3. oily, good4. tasty, too sweetActivity 2We should support and celebrate local food traditions.1.fast2. life3. farmers4. Europe5. membersActivity 3Adam: buttery Janet: spicy Abby: sweet Minh: healthy1.He wanted to lose weight because he was 20 pounds overweight.2.Because she has spent six months in Thailand and comes to like spicy Thai food.3.It means that Abby likes to eat sweet foods.4.Because Minh is training for a swimming competition and he has to eat healthy foods. And now he prefershealthy foods to sweet or buttery foods.Activity 41. T2.F3.T4.F5.F6.T7.T8. FCapsaicin: a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero: the hottest chile pepper in the world. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.Activity 5What they eat: fresh fruits, vegetables, fish;What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking;How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage1. 34 centenarians per 100,000 Okinawans.2. The Okinawans’secret: first, they eat a healthy diet. Second, they don’t do hard exercise. Third, the older Okinawans have a good attitude about aging.Dan: takes care of the baby Courtney: goes to work every dayJamal and Tia: both take care of the girls and work at home1. True2. True3. True4. FalseActivity 2Hometown: Milan New York Hong KongClothes from: brother a store in the neighborhood mother Personal style: casual retro, old fashioned classic Activity 31----f 2----c 3----b1.You could look for friends on the Internet.2.You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3.You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. Activity 41. b2. a1.Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time2.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearances.Activity 5A trendspotter finds things that are new and popular. Companies might hire trendspottersto help them make new products.1.She was nervous and didn’t know what to do.2.She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m.3.They had to decide which song were “Yes---All the way!”, “It’s Ok”, or “No way!”.4.They just talked about the covers they liked.5.They are going to look at some new fashions.1.doesn’t pay, NOT has a good salary2.week, NOT month3.six CD covers, NOT only one CD cover4. a “No way” card, NOT an “It’s OK” cardThe most famous detectives ever known imaginary detective sixty Scottish author moneyDoctor 1887 intelligent Dr. Waston EnglandActivity 24 1 35 2Nick Brown,police officer, local peopleMike thinks the lights could be the same as those in a local legend.Alexa thinks the lights are a hoax.Activity 31. A young girl standing in the middle of the road.2. Because it was raining heavily.3. He stopped the car quickly.4. She said ”I `m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.1. heavily2. clearly3. slowly4. neatly5. quickly6. strangely7. happily8. quietly9. Nervously 10. calmlyActivity 41. A terrible explosion2. In eastern Russia.3. June 30, 1908.(first row) 4, 1, 3; (second row) 5, 21. lots of damage huge explosion2. near Earth a part of it broke off3. crashed into the ground its engine exploded4. destroy the earth set fire to the forest5. used electricity a test of his gunActivity 52. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. c1.Different people see different lights.2.Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3.The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to earth.4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.1.Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of a circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.2.some people call the lights “ghost lights”.3.No, they aren’t. actually, they hold a town festival every September to celebrate the mystery lights.Rememberthe last picture1.Two tips. One is to label things in English. The other is to make a note of related words.2.You can rent a film and see it at home.Activity 2(from left to right)2, 3, 11.no one2. couldn’t run3. can’t swimActivity 31. pink2. pillars3. living room, kitchen4. large5. stereo system6. wasn’t1. True2. False; didn’t speak or smile3. False; all4. False; sitting5. True1. The storyteller heard a voice saying, “welcome home.” And he realized the dream house was his.2. He thought his dream was turning into a nightmare because his friends suddenly disappeared and it was scary.3. He liked the food processor most because it makes life much easier.4. He saw the stove was broken and that there was no electricity. He also saw the children were crying because they were hungry. He felt bad and wanted to help prepare a meal but began to despair when he found the refrigerator was empty.Activity 41. Stage 22. Stage 53. Stage 14. Stage 3 and 41.Four or five times.2. In stages 3 and 4.3. Fifteen to sixteen hours a day.4. Sleep is very important for learning.Activity 51. many times2. don’t remember3. very active4. gods5. Greeks and Romans1. True2. False3. False1. definite answers2. Why do we dream3. a person’s mind4. husband or wife5. start a business6. thoughts and feelings7. strange or confusing8. think about the events in the dream 9. feel free or want freedom 10. feel afraidUnit 7Activity 1bb a c1. another company2. a bachelor party and a big family reunion3. He’s excited about it and he likes the job.Activity 22, 4, 1, 3It was a lot of fun to rent loud and beautiful The only bad part for himfrom too much dancing some beautiful floats go down the river2,4,3,1traveling through India best memories water pistol shot/sprayed everyonea mess come out ofActivity 31.c2.a1. M2. D3. M4. M5. D1. gets very crowded2. after you arrive3. The most important event4. be sure to fins a good place to sit5. just relax and have fun6. before7. after the parade finishesActivity 41. F Before Mardi Gras even begins, there are over 70 parades of dazzling floats.2. F Start making reservations in August. Don’t wait until January.3. T Many streets are closed to cars, and bus and streetcar schedules often changed.4. T Get there early, about 4 hours ahead of big parades. For the Sunday night parade, find a space in the morning.5. F You might need a jacket, sunglasses, an umbrella, or all three.6. T People ride on floats in the parades and give “throws” to the crowd.Activity 5b. People use a groundhog to predict the weather.1. T2. F; Not 1995, but 19933. T4. F; Not doesn’t usually see, but usually sees1. A groundhog is a small animal covered with brown fur. It lives in a hole in the ground and stays undergroundduring the winter.2.Every February 2, local people and sightseers in the town of Punxsutawney watch for Pete, a groundhog, tocome out of its hole. If it comes out, Groundhog Day is celebrated with a barbecue, a colorful festival in the park, a souvenir show and sale and even a storytelling festival.3.People think it means the weather will continue to be cold for at least six weeks.4.The weather in February in Punxsutawney is generally cold and will continue to be cold for another six to eightweeks.5.People would be disappointed if Pete didn’t appear.UNIT 8Activity 1F T FCaller: 1,2,3,5 service: 3,4,5Activity 21, 2, 5, 7, 82, 3She wanted to be sure it is safe for her and her young child to cross the road.She also wanted to know if there were any parks she could take her son to.Activity 31. Immediate Release2. picking up dry cleaning3. taking your children to practice4. done for you1.all2.all EXCEPT library books3.all EXCEPT clean and brush your pet1.The services are affordable and convenient.2.They can call (010)55556666.Activity 41. Neither2.Both3.Bogota’4.Both5.Both6.Curitiba7.Neither8.Bogota’1.Because Curitiba was one of Brazil’s fastest growing cities and there were serious pollution problems.2.This plan has been very successful. Curitiba’s population has grown by more than one hundred percent since1974, but traffic has decreased by thirty percent. Curitiba has reduced air pollution and provided cleaner neighborhood for its citizens.bicycling and walking only Car Free Day without a car 125 closed to carsup to two million enjoy the clean air and quietActivity 5Inwood: eagles, an old forest, an old farmhouseFes-al-Bali: narrow streets, mosques, donkeys1. Inwood2.Fes-al-Bali3.Inwood4. Fes-al-Bal5.Inwood1.Inwood is a different in that it has lots of greenery. It has an old-growth forest, a farmhouse and you can gohiking.2.It’s more than 200 years old and it is no longer a farmhouse. It is now a museum.get lost a wall with gates drive across too narrow for cars walk pedestrians an donkeysReview: Units 1-4CDCCB BADABBAC ABA BDCDBCA ABD CDADtake care of sick telephone office effort spend someone elsehad gone out of town on some sudden unexpected businessI had missed seeing himEnjoyed my sightseeingReview: Units 5-8DDADA BCCBCBA BACBD CADBDC DACB DACcolor fashionable university worn to care for comfortable convenient Although T-shirts are now available in a wide varietymay bear a single wordnew designs are coming up all the time。
新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文
<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.A: Do you know that my handbag is missingB: There's a good chance that you will find it in the bedroom..The woman should look for her handbag in the dining room. (岭师分享群4发布)The woman should look for her handbag in the bedroom.Her handbag is probably lost.Her handbag is probably stolen in the shop.A: I had a strange dream last night. I was a prince.B: Well, it's only a dream ...The man's dream is very strange.The man's dream is real.The man shouldn't take the dream too seriously.The man should tell more about his dream.A: John, do you have a minuteB: Yeah. What is it, CarolA: I'm writing my term paper on my computer. But these windows keep popping up all the time. You see that one Do you know what's going onB: Oh, that's a problem. Have you used any software this morningA: I just received my emails and then I used this writing program, as always. B: Then it's really weird. When was the first time you saw these nasty windows A: This morning ... Oh, I remember ... something was wrong with my computer yesterday. B: What is itA: Um ... when I finished my work yesterday, the computer couldn't be shut off like before. So I just cut the power. Do you think it is connectedB: Maybe. Eh ... then ... what did you do on your computer yesterdayA: Surfing the net, writing the paper ... Oh, there was something more. I chatted with a friend online.B: All right. Now I see. It's probably a virus problem and you probably get it through the chatting program.A: Really Then what can I do nowB: Don't worry about that. I'll fix it.A: Oh, thank you. It's so kind of you.Questions 3 to 5 are based on the conversation you have just heard.What problem does Carol have on her computerShe cannot shut off her computer.Windows keep popping up.She cannot write her paper.The computer cannot be turned on.Carol _____ this morning.received emailssurfed the netdownloaded musicchatted onlineJohn thinks the problem is caused by ____.the chatting programthe email programCarol's carelessnessvirusDirections: In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).Passage OneThe Bermuda Triangle is an area of water in the North Atlantic Ocean where a large number of planes and boats have gone missing mysteriously. Over the years many explanations have been put forward for the disappearances. Although many of the reports have been exaggerated, there is still no explanation for the large number of disappearances in the area. Scientists now have two best theories for the mystery. One theory is that a giant sea animal lives in the triangle. It takes ships and pulls them down. A scientist once found a 6-foot eel, which is expected to grow 72 feet long. Someone also saw sea monsters. This theory is hard to be proven, but there may just be something in the Bermuda Triangle. The other better theory is the gas theory. Carbon dioxide is a gas that freezes at much warmer temperatures than water. The triangle is full of carbon dioxide and that means that when boats pass through the triangle, the gas can freeze on the base, making the boats sink from the weight. The gas can also explain plane disappearances too. When the engine starts, it can cause the gas in the air to catch fire and make theaircraft explode. The explosion can also explain the strange lights in the triangle.So this theory can explain a lot.Questions 6 to 10 are based on the passage you have just heard.Where is the Bermuda TriangleIn the North Pacific Ocean.In the South Pacific Ocean.In the North Atlantic Ocean.In the South Atlantic Ocean.A large number of boats and _____ have been reported missing in the area.shipspeoplefishplanesA scientist once found an eel which could grow to _____ long.6 feet12 feet36 feet72 feetCarbon dioxide ________ at much warmer temperature than water.turned into waterexpandsfreezesdisappearsAccording to one explanation, aircrafts explode because _____.the gas in the air catches fire when the engine startssinking boats are explodingthe temperature is too high in the areastrange lights have appeared in the airPassage TwoThe Stonehenge is located in southern England. It is a large circle of stones thatwas built around 2500-1600 . Its purpose still remains a mystery to scientists. Legend says that the heel stone, a famous stone there, was thrown by the devil intoa monk. It struck him on the heel and is still there. People used to believethe giants made the Stonehenge. Now many of them believe that the Stonehenge couldhave been used for religious purposes. It could be a calendar marking an event inthe future, according to its position that matched the stars. The Stonehenge couldhave been built for a religious God. More recently two major new theorieshave been proposed. According to one theory, the Stonehenge was used in a ritualand was joined to Durrington Walls and the River Avon. The area around Durrington Walls was a land of the living, while the Stonehenge was a land of the dead. A journey along the Avon to reach Stonehenge represents a journey from life to death, to honor the people who died in the past. The other theory suggested that Stonehenge was a place of healing. And that is why there are so many graves in the area. However supporters of both theories do agree that the place was probably used for ancestor worship.Questions 11 to 15 are based on the passage you have just heard.The Stonehenge in England is _____.no longer a mysterya large circle of stonesa riverside areaa circle of old wallsAccording to the legend, the heel stone was thrown by a devil into a ____.farmermonkgiantwomanWhy could the Stonehenge be used as a calendarBecause people marked important dates on it.Because the number of stones matched the number of days.Because it was located in the middle of England.Because its position matched the stars.One recent theory says that Stonehenge represents a journey _____.from poverty to wealthfrom child to adultfrom life to deathfrom sunrise to sunsetWhat do the two recent theories have in commonBoth of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship gods.Both of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship ancestors.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was built by British people.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was used by the church.<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several sentences. Listen carefully and then repeat.Sherlock Homes is probably the greatest detective ever known.He never actually existed.He was an imaginary detective who appears in sixty stories.He was very intelligent and successful and solved many cases.He always arrested the criminal.<b>Directions:</b> There is a short text shown on the computer screen (as is shown below). You are required to read the text aloud. Your voice will be recorded into the system. You'll have 1 minute for preparation and then you are required to begin reading when hearing the beginning signal sound and stop it when hearing the ending signal sound. Your reading should be limited within minutes. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.Déjà vu [] is a fancy term, taken from French, which means "already seen." It's a feeling you get that you've been somewhere and seen something or done something before. But you know perfectly well that you haven't been there before and haven't seen that or done that before. People get all excited about it, and think maybe they really did that stuff in a previous life or something. I'm a nurse and I've read all about it. What's really going on is some signal activity in the brain. And every now and then one of those signals runs the wrong way. So it's like a false thought. You feel like you were there before but you really weren't. It's just our brains' short-circuiting.<b>Directions:</b> Look at the picture below, which is about a well-known unsolved mystery. You are required to tell 1) what you have read or heard about it; 2) what part of it you believe and why; 3) what part of it you don't believe and why. You'll have 1 minute to prepare and another 2 minutes to complete your presentation. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.<b>Directions:</b> True or False. Watch the video clip and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F).Looking for Mr. Right Sun-hee: Tara, are you still reading the personal ads Tara: Yep.Sun-hee: You know those ads will never help you find a relationship.Tara: Yes, they will! I've already been on three dates.Sun-hee: Yeah. And you're still looking ...Tara: Well, it's just that I haven't found the right person yet.Sun-hee: I don't get it . You've been on three unsuccessful dates, and you still think it's a good idea. WhyTara: Well, for one thing, I wouldn't say all my dates have been completely unsuccessful. I may not have met "Mr. Right" yet, but I've still had fun.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have fun anywhere. You don't need to go searching through a newspaper for "Mr. Right".Tara: Sun-hee, it can happen! My friend Karen just got engaged to a man she met through the personals, and she dated lots of men before she met him.Sun-hee: And that means ... Sun-hee: He's probably a total Romeo ... "Romantic" ... "casual dating" ... there's no way he's sincere.Sun-hee: Hmm ... "good personality" ... "looks aren't everything" ... sounds like he might not be too cute.Tara: Why do you say that You've never even met him.Tara: You are so fussy! No wonder you haven't tried dating through the personals yet.Sun-hee: If you must know, I did answer a personal ad ... once.Tara: Yeah What happenedSun-hee: We went out for dinner, and all he did was talk about himself — and his old girlfriend! Oh, it was awful!Tara: OK, that does sound terrible, but they're not all bad.Tara: All right. Let's goTara is reading a magazine.TFTara already has three unsuccessful dates.TFTara's friend Karen married a man she met through the personal ads.TFSun-hee has never tried dating through personal ads.TFIn the end Tara and Sun-hee will go out to answer a personal ad.TF<b>Directions:</b> Fill in the blanks. Watch the video clip a and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have <u>fun</u> anywhere. You don't need to go <u>searching through</u> newspaper for "Mr. Right". ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never <u>give up</u> ! Ooh! Here's one: "Romantic, <u>handsome</u> , well-built male <u>looking for</u> attractive female for <u>casual dating</u> ." ... Tara: Why do you say that You've never <u>even met</u> him. Sun-hee: Well, first <u>of all</u> , he's writing about his "good <u>personality</u> " and "intelligence". And second of all, he's saying that <u>looks</u> shouldn't be important for the person he dates.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have anywhere. You don't need to go newspaper for "Mr. Right". ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never! Ooh! Here's one: "Romantic,, well-built maleattractive female for." ... Tara: Why do you say that You've neverhim. Sun-hee: Well, first, he'swriting about his "good" and "intelligence". And second of all, he's saying that shouldn't be important for the person he dates.<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer. (岭师分享群4发布)。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳术创编
新世纪大学英语2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too. The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). The re are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college; 8. had no friends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances. Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walk ed away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。
新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文
<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.A: Do you know that my handbag is missingB: There's a good chance that you will find it in the bedroom..The woman should look for her handbag in the dining room. (岭师分享群4发布)The woman should look for her handbag in the bedroom.Her handbag is probably lost.Her handbag is probably stolen in the shop.A: I had a strange dream last night. I was a prince.B: Well, it's only a dream ...The man's dream is very strange.The man's dream is real.The man shouldn't take the dream too seriously.The man should tell more about his dream.A: John, do you have a minuteB: Yeah. What is it, CarolA: I'm writing my term paper on my computer. But these windows keep popping up all the time. You see that one Do you know what's going onB: Oh, that's a problem. Have you used any software this morningA: I just received my emails and then I used this writing program, as always.B: Then it's really weird. When was the first time you saw these nasty windowsA: This morning ... Oh, I remember ... something was wrong with my computer yesterday. B: What is itA: Um ... when I finished my work yesterday, the computer couldn't be shut off like before. So I just cut the power. Do you think it is connectedB: Maybe. Eh ... then ... what did you do on your computer yesterdayA: Surfing the net, writing the paper ... Oh, there was something more. I chatted with a friend online.B: All right. Now I see. It's probably a virus problem and you probably get it through the chatting program.A: Really Then what can I do nowB: Don't worry about that. I'll fix it.A: Oh, thank you. It's so kind of you.Questions 3 to 5 are based on the conversation you have just heard.What problem does Carol have on her computerShe cannot shut off her computer.Windows keep popping up.She cannot write her paper.The computer cannot be turned on.Carol _____ this morning.received emailssurfed the netdownloaded musicchatted onlineJohn thinks the problem is caused by ____.the chatting programthe email programCarol's carelessnessvirusDirections: In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).Passage OneThe Bermuda Triangle is an area of water in the North Atlantic Ocean where a large number of planes and boats have gone missing mysteriously. Over the years many explanations have been put forward for the disappearances. Although many of the reports have been exaggerated, there is still no explanation for the large number of disappearances in the area. Scientists now have two best theories for the mystery. One theory is that a giant sea animal lives in the triangle. It takes ships and pulls them down. A scientist once found a 6-foot eel, which is expected to grow 72 feet long. Someone also saw sea monsters. This theory is hard to be proven, but there may just be something in the Bermuda Triangle. The other better theory is the gas theory. Carbon dioxide is a gas that freezes at much warmer temperatures than water. The triangle is full of carbon dioxide and that means that when boats pass through the triangle, the gas can freeze on the base, making the boats sink from the weight. The gas can also explain plane disappearances too.When the engine starts, it can cause the gas in the air to catch fire and make the aircraft explode. The explosion can also explain the strange lights in the triangle.So this theory can explain a lot.Questions 6 to 10 are based on the passage you have just heard.Where is the Bermuda TriangleIn the North Pacific Ocean.In the South Pacific Ocean.In the North Atlantic Ocean.In the South Atlantic Ocean.A large number of boats and _____ have been reported missing in the area.shipspeoplefishplanesA scientist once found an eel which could grow to _____ long.6 feet12 feet36 feet72 feetCarbon dioxide ________ at much warmer temperature than water.turned into waterexpandsfreezesdisappearsAccording to one explanation, aircrafts explode because _____.the gas in the air catches fire when the engine startssinking boats are explodingthe temperature is too high in the areastrange lights have appeared in the airPassage TwoThe Stonehenge is located in southern England. It is a large circle of stones thatwas built around 2500-1600 . Its purpose still remains a mystery to scientists. Legend says that the heel stone, a famous stone there, was thrown by the devil intoa monk. It struck him on the heel and is still there. People used to believethe giants made the Stonehenge. Now many of them believe that the Stonehenge couldhave been used for religious purposes. It could be a calendar marking an event inthe future, according to its position that matched the stars. The Stonehenge couldhave been built for a religious God. More recently two major new theorieshave been proposed. According to one theory, the Stonehenge was used in a ritual and was joined to Durrington Walls and the River Avon. The area around Durrington Walls was a land of the living, while the Stonehenge was a land of the dead. A journey along the Avon to reach Stonehenge represents a journey from life to death, to honor the people who died in the past. The other theory suggested that Stonehenge was a place of healing. And that is why there are so many graves in the area. However supporters of both theories do agree that the place was probably used for ancestor worship.Questions 11 to 15 are based on the passage you have just heard.The Stonehenge in England is _____.no longer a mysterya large circle of stonesa riverside areaa circle of old wallsAccording to the legend, the heel stone was thrown by a devil into a ____.farmermonkgiantwomanWhy could the Stonehenge be used as a calendarBecause people marked important dates on it.Because the number of stones matched the number of days.Because it was located in the middle of England.Because its position matched the stars.One recent theory says that Stonehenge represents a journey _____.from poverty to wealthfrom child to adultfrom life to deathfrom sunrise to sunsetWhat do the two recent theories have in commonBoth of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship gods.Both of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship ancestors.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was built by British people.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was used by the church.<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several sentences. Listen carefully and then repeat.Sherlock Homes is probably the greatest detective ever known.He never actually existed.He was an imaginary detective who appears in sixty stories.He was very intelligent and successful and solved many cases.He always arrested the criminal.<b>Directions:</b> There is a short text shown on the computer screen (as is shown below). You are required to read the text aloud. Your voice will be recorded into the system. You'll have 1 minute for preparation and then you are required to begin reading when hearing the beginning signal sound and stop it when hearing the ending signal sound. Your reading should be limited within minutes. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.Déjà vu [] is a fancy term, taken from French, which means already seen. It's a feeling you get that you've been somewhere and seen something or done something before. But you know perfectly well that you haven't been there before and haven't seen that or done that before. People get all excited about it, and think maybe they really did that stuff in a previous life or something. I'm a nurse and I've read all about it. What's really going on is some signal activity in the brain. And every now and then one of those signals runs the wrong way. So it's like a false thought. You feel like you were there before but you really weren't. It's just our brains' short-circuiting.<b>Directions:</b> Look at the picture below, which is about a well-known unsolved mystery. You are required to tell 1) what you have read or heard about it; 2) what part of it you believe and why; 3) what part of it you don't believe and why. You'll have 1 minute to prepare and another 2 minutes to complete your presentation. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.<b>Directions:</b> True or False. Watch the video clip and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F).Looking for Mr. Right Sun-hee: Tara, are you still reading the personal adsTara: Yep.Sun-hee: You know those ads will never help you find a relationship.Tara: Yes, they will! I've already been on three dates.Sun-hee: Yeah. And you're still looking ...Tara: Well, it's just that I haven't found the right person yet.Sun-hee: I don't get it . You've been on three unsuccessful dates, and you still think it's a good idea. WhyTara: Well, for one thing, I wouldn't say all my dates have been completely unsuccessful. I may not have met Mr. Right yet, but I've still had fun.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have fun anywhere. You don't need to go searching through a newspaper for Mr. Right.Tara: Sun-hee, it can happen! My friend Karen just got engaged to a man she met through the personals, and she dated lots of men before she met him.Sun-hee: And that means ... Sun-hee: He's probably a total Romeo ... Romantic ... casual dating ... there's no way he's sincere.Sun-hee: Hmm ... good personality ... looks aren't everything ... sounds likehe might not be too cute.Tara: Why do you say that You've never even met him.Tara: You are so fussy! No wonder you haven't tried dating through the personals yet.Sun-hee: If you must know, I did answer a personal ad ... once.Tara: Yeah What happenedSun-hee: We went out for dinner, and all he did was talk about himself — and his old girlfriend! Oh, it was awful!Tara: OK, that does sound terrible, but they're not all bad.Tara: All right. Let's goTara is reading a magazine.TFTara already has three unsuccessful dates.TFTara's friend Karen married a man she met through the personal ads.TFSun-hee has never tried dating through personal ads.TFIn the end Tara and Sun-hee will go out to answer a personal ad.TF<b>Directions:</b> Fill in the blanks. Watch the video clip a and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have <u>fun</u> anywhere. You don't need to go<u>searching through</u> newspaper for Mr. Right. ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never <u>give up</u> ! Ooh! Here's one: Romantic, <u>handsome</u> ,well-built male <u>looking for</u> attractive female for <u>casualdating</u> . ... Tara: Why do you say that You've never <u>even met</u> him.Sun-hee: Well, first <u>of all</u> , he's writing about his good<u>personality</u> and intelligence. And second of all, he's saying that<u>looks</u> shouldn't be important for the person he dates.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have anywhere. You don't need to go newspaper for Mr. Right. ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never! Ooh! Here's one: Romantic,, well-built maleattractive female for. ... Tara: Why do you say that You've neverhim. Sun-hee: Well, first, he'swriting about his good and intelligence.And second of all, he's saying that shouldn't be important for the person he dates.<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), 发布)4(岭师分享群B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳学创编
新世纪大学英语 2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it. G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I wentto visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a longtime to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home.I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home! Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign;8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study. M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community. J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, forexample, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchersthink that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening andwalking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale. I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳学创编Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳引擎创编
新世纪大学英语2 optional listening欧阳引擎(2021.01.01)Unit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I w rote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high schoo l book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings,journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college; 8. had no friends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mother M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: F or what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many g estures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed. People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. pr oject; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That mean s I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people! What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They ea t many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t under stand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comforta ble! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trend spotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Tren ds Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular rig ht now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our to ur. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classic OL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to se em like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked awa y quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small tow n in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Differen t people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I d on’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothe s on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran towa rd me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.。
新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳地创编
新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around inthere! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of mygrandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The lastphotos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (astudent with a good fashion sense). There arealso other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students writenotes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiencesthey shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman;4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents andhe saw lots of interesting places. In the end,he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautifulbooks to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them withfelt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the endof the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook;6. titles;7. sign;8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community. J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them. Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth recordsfrom 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchersthink that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening andwalking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makesyour mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in theworld. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale. I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice? Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest;7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in.I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table,a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electricity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Optional Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night.How much sleep do you need? The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hpurs of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sle ep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early.Optional Listening 4The meaning of dreamsFor centuries, people have asked: why do we dream? What do our dreams mean? Today, science doesn’t have definite answers to t hese questions, but we do know some things about dreams. First, we all dream, often 4 to 5 times a night. Second, we don’t usually remember most of our dreams. And finally, when we dream, our brains are very active. Thousands of years ago, people began to study dreams. In many cultures, people believed dreams were messages from spirits or gods. Later, the ancient Greeks and Romans had a new idea: Dreams come from a person’s mind. Doctors studied dreams to help sick or worried people.I n the past, some cultures used dreams to predict the future. They thought dreams could help a person choose a husband or wife, guess a baby’s birthday, or starts a business. IN some places, this practice is still common.Today, scientists think dreams are about our thoughts and feelings. Our minds send us messages about our lives. Unfortunately, many messages are often strange or confusing. People wake up and think: What did that dream mean?。
- 1、下载文档前请自行甄别文档内容的完整性,平台不提供额外的编辑、内容补充、找答案等附加服务。
- 2、"仅部分预览"的文档,不可在线预览部分如存在完整性等问题,可反馈申请退款(可完整预览的文档不适用该条件!)。
- 3、如文档侵犯您的权益,请联系客服反馈,我们会尽快为您处理(人工客服工作时间:9:00-18:30)。
新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的optional listening 原文及答案免费下载Unit One, Book 22-1-3------- 2-1-4 ------ Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My year book. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook page s. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or“ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon.3.Yes;4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standi ng at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mother M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re real ly busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety. J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS a nd drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community. Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putti ng their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to h im with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them. Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have fun Unit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products. Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t lik e it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica. Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, theOkinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t exp ect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They d on’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting orjogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging.They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast;2.life;3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that producesheat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in theCaribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax:deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. getscovered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted;10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fash ionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m fr om Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do? B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pa nts after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no j ewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One ca rd said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashioned Vicki: mother, classicOL2:A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do. 2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”. 4. They just talked about the covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions. C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month 3. six CD covers, not one CD cover 4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” card OL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired;6.stop to rest;7. had better;8. get some ice cream;9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So,we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lightswere bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysteriousligh ts … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in.I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Ohyes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five yea rs ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that. Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear. Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights. KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery. OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment;5. showing;6. has an al ibi;7. it isn’t true;8. walks in;9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, b ut I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep. Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.。